<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=J%C3%A9r%C3%A9mie</id>
	<title>WikInsituEn - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=J%C3%A9r%C3%A9mie"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/J%C3%A9r%C3%A9mie"/>
	<updated>2026-04-19T21:14:06Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.38.4</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Optimising_lighting&amp;diff=922</id>
		<title>Optimising lighting</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Optimising_lighting&amp;diff=922"/>
		<updated>2024-08-08T15:52:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Optimising lighting&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bVlvsI0WnSc&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqEJC2D74UzlTJ25Z_3IARfw&amp;amp;index=3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Dialog box for lighting the scene in Realtime photorealistic perspective mode&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In '''Realtime photorealistic perspective''' mode, the changes made in this dialog box immediately take effect in the view, enabling you to achieve your desired lighting very quickly. These settings also apply to the final photorealism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changes linked to the lighting can be found in the '''Scene''' drop down menu under '''Lighting''' or via the icon [[Image:Lampe.JPG|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Default settings in the dialog box&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lighting window is divided into 3 tabs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Tab 1: Natural light'''&lt;br /&gt;
Allows you to adjust natural lighting settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lumières_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Tab 2: Artificial light'''&lt;br /&gt;
Allows you to adjust the artificial light settings. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lumières2_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Tab 3: Light sources'''&lt;br /&gt;
Allows you to manage the lighting that you added yourself to the scene settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lumières3_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In our example, 4 spots have been placed towards the bottom (these spots are available in the @Base forms catalogue, in the Light sources chapter). They are therefore adjustable in the dialog box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''A. Column''' refers to whether the light sources are lit. You can manage each element individually and light (or not) the ones that you wish to light. The box is ticked by default and means that the selected light source is lit. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Sel. column''' allows you to select the object. Therefore, in a scene in which you placed several light sources of the same type, you can easily identify the light source affected by the settings. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Colour column''' allows you to choose the colour of the diffused light. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''IES column''' gives you the option of changing the style of light projected (the curve of the beam). You have the choice of 20 different options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lumières4_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, you can choose the intensity of the light sources, either for each individual light source or for the entirety of light sources in a scene thanks to the intensity slider. &lt;br /&gt;
If you only wish to adjust one light source, select it before moving the Intensity slider. &lt;br /&gt;
To manage the intensity of all the light sources or a particular selection of them, tick the Sel. box to select the relevant light sources. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Adjusting the tone&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lumières5_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The settings window for tone is only available for the '''Realtime photorealistic perspective''' and '''Final photorealistic perspective''' views. It appears automatically at the end of the calculation of the final photorealism. However, you can access it at any time through the '''View''' drop down menu, and then '''Tone mapping'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;The luminous halo&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you play around with the rendering of the lightings. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuephotoreelfinal6_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuephotoreelfinal7_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Light source&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CThis feature allows you to adjust the light source in the Realistic drawing perspective view: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;- intensity&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;- contrast&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;- horizontal and vertical angles of light propagation in realistic drawing perspective.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lumières6_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default values are: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Light = 80&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Contrast = 30&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Horizontal angle = 70&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Vertical angle = - 45.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] The decorative luminaires can also help light the scene. To activate its lighting, you must open a luminaire like you would open a door, via the feature in '''Selection | Open'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Top view|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Positioning_the_observer&amp;diff=921</id>
		<title>Positioning the observer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Positioning_the_observer&amp;diff=921"/>
		<updated>2024-08-08T15:50:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Positioning the observer&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Observer view&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Observer view lets you manually adjust the field of view, in the 3D view, by the project altitude and tilt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The altitude refers to the height of the view and the tilt allows you to have bird's eye views, for example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To access it, go to InSitu's '''View''' drop down menu, and then click on '''Observer'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Observateur_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Initial Observer view&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Initial Observer''' view lets you reposition the starting point of the visual field in 3D view.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To activate it, go to '''View | Initial Observer'''. This feature if very useful when you have adjusted the settings but you want to cancel these changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Optimising lighting|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Positioning_the_observer&amp;diff=920</id>
		<title>Positioning the observer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Positioning_the_observer&amp;diff=920"/>
		<updated>2024-08-08T15:49:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Positioning the observer&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Positioning the observer&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Observer view lets you manually adjust the field of view, in the 3D view, by the project altitude and tilt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The altitude refers to the height of the view and the tilt allows you to have bird's eye views, for example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To access it, go to InSitu's '''View''' drop down menu, and then click on '''Observer'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Observateur_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Initial Observer view&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Initial Observer''' view lets you reposition the starting point of the visual field in 3D view.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To activate it, go to '''View | Initial Observer'''. This feature if very useful when you have adjusted the settings but you want to cancel these changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Optimising lighting|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Positioning_the_observer&amp;diff=919</id>
		<title>Positioning the observer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Positioning_the_observer&amp;diff=919"/>
		<updated>2024-08-08T15:49:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Top view&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Positioning the observer&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Observer view lets you manually adjust the field of view, in the 3D view, by the project altitude and tilt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The altitude refers to the height of the view and the tilt allows you to have bird's eye views, for example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To access it, go to InSitu's '''View''' drop down menu, and then click on '''Observer'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Observateur_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Initial Observer view&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Initial Observer''' view lets you reposition the starting point of the visual field in 3D view.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To activate it, go to '''View | Initial Observer'''. This feature if very useful when you have adjusted the settings but you want to cancel these changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Optimising lighting|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_a_visual_field&amp;diff=918</id>
		<title>Placing a visual field</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_a_visual_field&amp;diff=918"/>
		<updated>2024-08-08T15:10:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing a visual field&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AwE5R8hKZsk&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqEJC2D74UzlTJ25Z_3IARfw&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Visual fields allow you to orient yourself according to the desired direction, angle of vision on a part of your project. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Go to '''View''' | '''Visual field'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Position the eye icon in the direction of your desired visual field. The illustration below explains the order that you want to &amp;quot;trace&amp;quot; with the mouse to place the visual field. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Champdevision_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Champvision_FR.gif|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Go to '''View''' | '''Real time photorealistic perspective''' to see the project via the visual field that you like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- To delete a visual field, in the '''View''' drop down menu, click on '''Observation point''' | '''Initial'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- To save your visual fields, go to '''View''' | '''Observation point''' | '''save observer'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Positioning the observer|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Using_the_secondary_window&amp;diff=917</id>
		<title>Using the secondary window</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Using_the_secondary_window&amp;diff=917"/>
		<updated>2024-08-08T12:19:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Using the secondary window&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As well as the main window, InSitu can open a second window which always contains a perspective view of teh current scene. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To open it, go to '''View | Secondary window'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then work in top view or elevation view, all while seeing the scene get built in perspective. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fenetresecondaire_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have two screens connected to your graphics card, you can display the main window on one screen and the secondary window on the other screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen displaying the secondary window (always the perspective) can also be shown to clients. You can then make changes that they won't see. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Placing a visual field|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Walk_through_mode&amp;diff=915</id>
		<title>Walk through mode</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Walk_through_mode&amp;diff=915"/>
		<updated>2024-08-08T12:12:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Walk through mode&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Walk through view&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This view lets you walk through the finished scene in full screen. Real time movement mode within the scene.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Movement in the room can be done thanks to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- the arrows on the keyboard&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
-  the right mouse button (keep it pressed down + move the mouse),&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- the following keys on the keyboard:&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;commentaires&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ESCAPE or CTRL + Page up = go up, &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;X or CTRL + Page down = go down,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;S or CTRL + left arrow = move to the left,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;D or CTRL + right arrow = move to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on the + button allows you to move faster when in visit mode, while clicking on - allows you to move slower. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Saved walkthrough view&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- You can save your walkthrough all while moving in real time in the scene. This is saved as a text file (.TXT) and is only useable in InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- This walkthrough can also be saved as video (.AVI), which is then easy to show in Windows Media Player or VLC. To save a walk through, choose the drop down menu &amp;quot;Scene&amp;quot;, then &amp;quot;Saved walk though&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;New&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Using the secondary window|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=360_Panorama&amp;diff=913</id>
		<title>360 Panorama</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=360_Panorama&amp;diff=913"/>
		<updated>2024-08-08T12:09:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;360 Panorama&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=oFgwA_9FwNo&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqEJC2D74UzlTJ25Z_3IARfw&amp;amp;index=5&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 360° panorama is fantastic tool for helping with both sales and communication. It generates a 360° 3D panorama of your room. &lt;br /&gt;
This panorama can be displayed on a computer, a tablet or a mobile phone and can be very easily sent by email to the final customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;[http://www.myinsitu.com/Pano.htm?panoDir=/KDPanos/pano_0_org Voir un exemple de panorama 360]&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;[https://panoramas.b-cdn.net/Viewer1/pano.htm?panoDir=/panoramas/895790705-1668070656 Voir un exemple de Panorama 360° multi vues]&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can see, it allows you to visualise the entirety of the project while being able to change the point of view thanks to the dots. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have finished your project, make sure that you save your [[Placing a visual field|visual frields]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also generate 360° panoramas without visual fields. In that case, the panroama is generated from the middle of the room or the view at the time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the &amp;quot;file&amp;quot; drop down menu and then choose &amp;quot;Post 360° Panorama&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Panorama360_ENG.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two different resolutions are available: &lt;br /&gt;
Medium resolution (1024 pixels)&lt;br /&gt;
High resolution (2048 pixels)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Careful, the high resolution will take longer to generate. Also be aware that the calculations use your computer's processing power, which means it's an important factor to take into account...  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have chosen the resolution you want, you can choose the number of points of view from which you want the panorama to be generated. &lt;br /&gt;
Once again, the more points of view chosen, the longer the panorama will take to generate. These points of views, in other words, the visual fields that were saved previously, will then become the dots that let you change your point of view.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Panorama360B_ENG.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also choose the real time photorealistic quality to generate a 360 much quicker but of lower quality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When it has finished, the software will open the panorama on an Internet page. &lt;br /&gt;
You can copy and paste the link and then send it to your client via email. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;border:solid 1px #ea560d;border-radius:5px;background-color:#f6f6f6;padding:10px&amp;quot;&amp;gt; To easily find your links, we suggest creating an excel or similar file and pasting the various links you have generated. It will be much easier to sort through them. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Walk through mode|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Virtual_reality_view&amp;diff=912</id>
		<title>Virtual reality view</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Virtual_reality_view&amp;diff=912"/>
		<updated>2024-08-08T12:08:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Virtual reality view&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With an Oculus Rift® or HTC Vive® headset, then InSitu VR allows your client to visualise the entire project in virtual reality. The user can move freely throughout the space, moving forward, backwards, turning 360°, crouching down and looking up. Their movements are automatically detected by the headset. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YcXAQZGuvp0&amp;amp;feature=youtu.be&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Watch the video tutorial&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;How it works&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the headset is connected and set-up, launch the view created for VR by clicking on View &amp;gt; Virtual reality or via the icon [[Image:IconeVR.JPG|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:RealitéVirtuelle_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 3D view is then transferred to the headset, allowing its user free to virtually stroll through the development project. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La réalité virtuelle est interactive, il est possible d’ouvrir les portes et les tiroirs quand on se promène dans le projet (non disponible pour l’ensemble des catalogues - en cours de déploiement). The virtual reality is interactive, meaning that it is possible to open doors and drawers while walking through the project (not available for the entirety of the catalogues - still in the process of being rolled out)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:RealitéVirtuelle2_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:RealitéVirtuelle3_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[360 Panorama|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Virtual_reality_view&amp;diff=911</id>
		<title>Virtual reality view</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Virtual_reality_view&amp;diff=911"/>
		<updated>2024-08-08T12:07:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Virtual reality view&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With an Oculus Rift® or HTC Vive® headset, then InSitu VR allows your client to visualise the entire project in virtual reality. The user can move freely throughout the space, moving forward, backwards, turning 360°, crouching down and looking up. Their movements are automatically detected by the headset. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YcXAQZGuvp0&amp;amp;feature=youtu.be&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Watch the video tutorial&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;How it works&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the headset is connected and set-up, launch the view created for VR by clicking on View &amp;gt; Virtual reality or via the icon [[Image:IconeVR.JPG|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:RealitéVirtuelle_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 3D view is then transferred to the headset, allowing its user free to virtually stroll through the development project. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La réalité virtuelle est interactive, il est possible d’ouvrir les portes et les tiroirs quand on se promène dans le projet (non disponible pour l’ensemble des catalogues - en cours de déploiement). The virtual reality is interactive, meaning that it is possible to open doors and drawers while walking through the project (not available for the entirety of the catalogues - still in the process of being rolled out)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:RealitéVirtuelle2_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:RealitéVirtuelle3_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Elevation views|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Virtual_reality_view&amp;diff=910</id>
		<title>Virtual reality view</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Virtual_reality_view&amp;diff=910"/>
		<updated>2024-08-08T12:06:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Virtual reality view/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With an Oculus Rift® or HTC Vive® headset, then InSitu VR allows your client to visualise the entire project in virtual reality. The user can move freely throughout the space, moving forward, backwards, turning 360°, crouching down and looking up. Their movements are automatically detected by the headset. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YcXAQZGuvp0&amp;amp;feature=youtu.be&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Watch the video tutorial&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;How it works&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the headset is connected and set-up, launch the view created for VR by clicking on View &amp;gt; Virtual reality or via the icon [[Image:IconeVR.JPG|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:RealitéVirtuelle_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 3D view is then transferred to the headset, allowing its user free to virtually stroll through the development project. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La réalité virtuelle est interactive, il est possible d’ouvrir les portes et les tiroirs quand on se promène dans le projet (non disponible pour l’ensemble des catalogues - en cours de déploiement). The virtual reality is interactive, meaning that it is possible to open doors and drawers while walking through the project (not available for the entirety of the catalogues - still in the process of being rolled out)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:RealitéVirtuelle2_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:RealitéVirtuelle3_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[360 Panorama|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Final_photorealistic_perspective&amp;diff=909</id>
		<title>Final photorealistic perspective</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Final_photorealistic_perspective&amp;diff=909"/>
		<updated>2024-08-08T12:03:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Top view&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Important&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Visualisation problems? If you wish to hide a bothersome wall or, do the opposite and disable this option, go to the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;[[Setting up graphic options|Setting up graphic options]]&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Final photorealistic perspective is a &amp;quot;high quality&amp;quot; view. The materials stand out and their specificities become clear (the reliefs, the shine, the reflection, ...)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuephotoreelfinal_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pick '''View''' | '''Final photorealistic perspective'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The image is produced after successive calculations of iterations that converge towards the optimal quality. &lt;br /&gt;
By default, the calculation stops after its sixteenth iteration. Then, a dialog box will appear, allowing you to play with the sliders and alter the intensity, the contrast, the colour, the temperature and the luminous halo. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuephotoreelfinal2_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you no longer want this dialog box to appear, simply go to '''View''' | '''Tone mapping''' and tick the '''Do not show this dialog box after each image'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To come back on the calculation of an iteration, all you need to do is press on the F2 key. The software will then perform calculations for an infinite number of iterations. You will need to end these calculations by pressing on the ESCAPE key. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is worth noting that you can change the default number of iterations via the '''Scene''' drop down menu, then '''Photorealism'''. In the '''Final photorealism''' tab, the number of iterations will be displayed, which you can change. If you want this change to apply every time, remember to press the '''By default''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:LogoInfo.png|link=]] If you wish to change the number of iterations, go to '''Scene | Photorealism''' and then to the '''Final photorealism''' tab and change the number of iterations from 16 to whatever you prefer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuephotoreelfinal3_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;The temperature&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to set the scene's colour ambiance. &lt;br /&gt;
The further the slider is to the left, the more cold, blue-dominated tones the scene will have. &lt;br /&gt;
The further the slider is to the right, the more warm, yellow-dominated tones the scene will have. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuephotoreelfinal4_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuephotoreelfinal5_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Virtual reality view|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Real_time_photorealistic_perspective&amp;diff=908</id>
		<title>Real time photorealistic perspective</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Real_time_photorealistic_perspective&amp;diff=908"/>
		<updated>2024-08-08T09:03:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Real time photorealistic perspective&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Important&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Visualisation problems? If you wish to hide a bothersome wall or, do the opposite and disable this option, go to the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;[[Setting up graphic options|Setting up graphic options]]&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This view is almost equivalent to a &amp;quot;photo&amp;quot; type quality all while allowing you to move in the scene in real time. This view provides an overview of the textures displayed on screen. You will therefore be able to distinguish the different materials used in the room.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuephotoreel_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To access it, simply click on the icon [[Image:Vuephotoreel2_FR.png|link=]] or via the '''View''' drop down menu in InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This view is based on the DirectX11 technology and is offered by default in InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Real-time photorealistic performance in the DirectX11 mode depends on your hardware set-up(graphics card). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Changing the default technology by going from DirectX9 to DirectX11&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drop down menu '''Setup''' | '''Graphic''' | '''Options''' ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Directx_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Final photorealistic perspective|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Realistic_drawing_perspective&amp;diff=907</id>
		<title>Realistic drawing perspective</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Realistic_drawing_perspective&amp;diff=907"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T14:09:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Realistic drawing perspective&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=LF2xbWoM6Gw&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqEJC2D74UzlTJ25Z_3IARfw&amp;amp;index=7&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
InSitu allows you to produce images that resemble handmade drawings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuerendudessin_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuerendudessin2_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Displaying the rendering of the hand-drawn view in the real-time photorealistic perspective&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''Scene | Photorealism''' and then to '''Realtime photorealism''' and tick the '''Edges''' box. You can use the '''contraste''' slider to highlight lines to the extent that you wish and you can play with the '''jag''' slider to give your lines a more 'sketched' look. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like a black and white rendering, tick the '''Monochrome''' box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are happy with how you've set everything up, launch the '''Realtime photorealistic perspective'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuerendudessin3_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Displaying the rendering of the hand-drawn view in the final photorealistic perspective &amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, go to '''Scene | Photorealism''', then '''Final photorealism'''. Once again, tick the '''Edges''' and '''Monochrome''' boxes depending on how you would like the final rendering to look. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, launch the '''Final photorealistic perspective'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuerendudessin4_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Real time photorealistic perspective|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Realistic_drawing_perspective&amp;diff=906</id>
		<title>Realistic drawing perspective</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Realistic_drawing_perspective&amp;diff=906"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T14:06:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Realistic drawing perspective&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=LF2xbWoM6Gw&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqEJC2D74UzlTJ25Z_3IARfw&amp;amp;index=7&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
InSitu permet de produire des images qui ressemblent à des dessins faits à la main.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuerendudessin_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuerendudessin2_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Displaying the rendering of the hand-drawn view in the real-time photorealistic perspective&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''Scene | Photorealism''' and then to '''Realtime photorealism''' and tick the '''Edges''' box. You can use the '''contraste''' slider to highlight lines to the extent that you wish and you can play with the '''jag''' slider to give your lines a more 'sketched' look. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like a black and white rendering, tick the '''Monochrome''' box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are happy with how you've set everything up, launch the '''Realtime photorealistic perspective'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuerendudessin3_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Displaying the rendering of the hand-drawn view in the final photorealistic perspective &amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, go to '''Scene | Photorealism''', then '''Final photorealism'''. Once again, tick the '''Edges''' and '''Monochrome''' boxes depending on how you would like the final rendering to look. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, launch the '''Final photorealistic perspective'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuerendudessin4_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Real time photorealistic perspective|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Perspective_views&amp;diff=896</id>
		<title>Perspective views</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Perspective_views&amp;diff=896"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:25:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Perspective views&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Important&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Visualisation problems? If you wish to hide a bothersome wall or, do the opposite and disable this option, go to the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;[[Setting up graphic options|Setting up graphic options]]&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Wireframe drawing perspective&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuepersepective_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The wireframe drawing perspective is a 3D view that allows you to visualise the outlines and the fronts of the elements placed in the scene. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Hidden faces drawing perspective&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuepersepective2_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The hidden faces drawing perspective is a 3D view that shows the outline of each element without being transparent. Therefore, you can see the outside of the elements and their fronts but not the inner fittings. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Realistic drawing perspective&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuepersepective3_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The realistic drawing perspective is a 3D view with defined colours in teh finishes of teh walls, the furniture... It gives you a 3D overview of the final result.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] When you place an object from the &amp;quot;Virtual reality&amp;quot; perspective, look on the mark on the ground to place the element in the right position. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;How to change the point of view? &amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The point of the view of the perspective can be changed with the help of the scrollbars located to the right and to the bottom of the drawing. The horizontal scrollbar at the bottom of the drawing allows you to turn around the scene. (Fig.6g) The vertical scrollbar located to the right of the drawing allow you to access bird's eye views. (Fig.6h)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Barredefilement.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] There is a second vertical scrollbar located above the previously mentioned one. Like with a camera, it adjusts the focal length of the perceived object. Unless you know how to use it, it's better to not use that scrollbar. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;To slightly rotate the point of view&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on one of the two arrows at the ends of the scrollbar. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;To considerably rotate the point of view&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click in the empty areas between the scrollbar's arrows and the slider. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;To dynamically adjust the point of view&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - Bring to mouse cursor to the scrollbar. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 - Left click on the mouse and keep it pressed down. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3 - Gently slide the slider along the scrollbar and see how the point of view changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4 - Release the left mouse button when you are satisfied with the new point of view. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The perspective view instantly appears on screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Realistic drawing perspective|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Perspective_views&amp;diff=884</id>
		<title>Perspective views</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Perspective_views&amp;diff=884"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:21:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Perspective views&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Important&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Visualisation problems? If you wish to hide a bothersome wall or, do the opposite and disable this option, go to the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;[[Configurer les options graphiques|Setting up graphic options]]&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Wireframe drawing perspective&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuepersepective_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The wireframe drawing perspective is a 3D view that allows you to visualise the outlines and the fronts of the elements placed in the scene. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Hidden faces drawing perspective&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuepersepective2_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The hidden faces drawing perspective is a 3D view that shows the outline of each element without being transparent. Therefore, you can see the outside of the elements and their fronts but not the inner fittings. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Realistic drawing perspective&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuepersepective3_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The realistic drawing perspective is a 3D view with defined colours in teh finishes of teh walls, the furniture... It gives you a 3D overview of the final result.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] When you place an object from the &amp;quot;Virtual reality&amp;quot; perspective, look on the mark on the ground to place the element in the right position. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;How to change the point of view? &amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The point of the view of the perspective can be changed with the help of the scrollbars located to the right and to the bottom of the drawing. The horizontal scrollbar at the bottom of the drawing allows you to turn around the scene. (Fig.6g) The vertical scrollbar located to the right of the drawing allow you to access bird's eye views. (Fig.6h)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Barredefilement.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] There is a second vertical scrollbar located above the previously mentioned one. Like with a camera, it adjusts the focal length of the perceived object. Unless you know how to use it, it's better to not use that scrollbar. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;To slightly rotate the point of view&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on one of the two arrows at the ends of the scrollbar. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;To considerably rotate the point of view&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click in the empty areas between the scrollbar's arrows and the slider. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;To dynamically adjust the point of view&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - Bring to mouse cursor to the scrollbar. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 - Left click on the mouse and keep it pressed down. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3 - Gently slide the slider along the scrollbar and see how the point of view changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4 - Release the left mouse button when you are satisfied with the new point of view. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The perspective view instantly appears on screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Realistic drawing perspective|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Elevation_views&amp;diff=877</id>
		<title>Elevation views</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Elevation_views&amp;diff=877"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:17:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Elevation views&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enter an elevation perspective, no matter which one, you must &amp;lt;B&amp;gt;select the wall&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; affected by the elevation. &lt;br /&gt;
You may also enter an elevation perspective of a wall by double clicking &lt;br /&gt;
the desired wall. &lt;br /&gt;
Likewise, if you place an elevation symbol, double clicking on the symbol will enter you into the &lt;br /&gt;
elevation perspective. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;The wireframe Elevation view&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vueelevation_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''wireframe elevation''' view allows you to see the elements as if they were transparent, with only their outlines drawn. &lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, you can see the inside of the pieces of furniture and their various fittings. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Realistic Elevation perspective&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vueelevation2_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''realistic elevation''' view allows for the elevation of a wall while keeping the colours and textures of the elements that have already been placed. The furniture will keep the same front and you cannot see inside the furniture. This view is particularly used for vertical elements such as credenzas. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] When you do not have a wall to use for an elevation, you must place a &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[Placing text, arrows, symbols|elevation symbol]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Perspective views|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Top_view&amp;diff=876</id>
		<title>Top view</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Top_view&amp;diff=876"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:12:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Top view&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The top view allows you to see the plan of the scene.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuedessus.JPG|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Top view is one of the views that you will use the most. Building walls, placing constraints, positionning your furniture and decorations, adding your floors and ceilings, you will mostly perform these tasks in top view. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each element placed in the scene will have a number on them. This number refers to the order that the elements were placed. They are also called marks. You have the option of changing some attributes by going to '''Scene | Mark...'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Marquage_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:1orange.png|left|link=]] The type: no mark, the order numbers (by default), the catalogue references, the user references (can be changed in the attributes of the object). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:2orange.png|left|link=]] The style: the size of the characters, the colour and the background colour.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:3orange.png|left|link=]] The orientation: allows the text to always be horizontal, always vertical or to follow the orientation of the object (by default). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Drawing mode'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting an object, you have the option of modifying its '''Drawing mode'''. To do so: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - Select an object&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 - Click on the '''Selection''' drop down menu and then on '''Drawing mode'''. A dialog box will appear. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Modedessin_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3 - Change, as needed, the various information contained in the dialog box: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- the filling-in style &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- the style or thickness of the lines&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- the colour&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- the attenuation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Elevation views|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Creating_a_palette_of_textures&amp;diff=861</id>
		<title>Creating a palette of textures</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Creating_a_palette_of_textures&amp;diff=861"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T07:46:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;79%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Creating a palette of textures&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iljgSQeZflA&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqEJC2D74UzlTJ25Z_3IARfw&amp;amp;index=6&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your own texture palette. This table of textures allows you to define all the colours (with or without material effects). You can link coefficients and images to textures so that you can better control characteristics like the level of transparency, of reflection and more when in the &amp;quot;photorealism&amp;quot; mode. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create your own texture palette, go to the '''Setup''' drop down menu and click on '''Graphic | Palette''' ..., (Fig.38a)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Palette.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Texture display principles&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The textures are displayed on a volume per paving, which means that the texture that you create will recreate itself as many times as possible in the available space (width, depth and height) like when tiles are placed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Pavage.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Definition of the general information&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Palette1.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Code Section&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each texture needs a code. This code must be unique and cannot exceed eight characters. In the textures table, the code is not necessarily the same as the colour's commercial code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Name Section&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the material's name. For example: Matt white melamine&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Colour Section&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the colour that will appear in all the generic finishes, objects and attributes windows in InSitu. To set the colour, click twice on the cell. A Colour dialog box will appear on screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;File Section (JPG ou BMP)&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By double clicking this section, you will give access to the material's file. For example: Exoticwood1.Jpg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: this jpg or bmp file must imperatively be placed beforehand in the &amp;quot;InSitu\Textures&amp;quot; folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Width and Height section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They correspond to the height in millimetres that the texture will be displayed in. For example, if your &amp;quot;Exoticwood1.Jpg&amp;quot; file represents a 600 mm wide and 1200 mm high sample of wood, those are the measurements you should enter.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tinted Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This box allows you to convert the jpg or bmp file into black and white, and you can then tint it to the colour of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;For the InSitu palette: this allows you to change the colour of the texture on the object. Right click, Attributes and then change the colour.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;For a Mobiscript catalogue: this allows you to manage several colours from just one jpg file. For example: with an Oak.jpg file, you have access to wood finishes lacquered oak lacquered green, red, blue, etc.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Modulated Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a .jpg or .bmp file is too light or dark, this can lead to a loss of detail in InSitu. By ticking the &amp;quot;Modulated&amp;quot; box, the engine that creates the computer-generated image will make calculations differently from the file and will find the detail that consists of adding or removing contrast (available for textures that are nearly black and white). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Incorporated Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you tick this box, the jpg or bmp file will be integrated directly to the catalogue or the palette. This will notably allow you to copy the catalogue and/or the palette without also needing to copy the textures that are associated to it (contained in the InSitu texture folder), since they are then already contained in the catalogue and/or palette. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;The Emission&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Emission1.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Emission Section allows you to simulate an illuminating surface. It is only visible as a final computer-generated image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of an illumination image in final photorealism perspective with a coefficient of: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Emission2.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The higher the coefficient is, the more illuminating the image will be. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you add a colour via the Colour section, the emission will be coloured too. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Emission3.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;The specular&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Speculaire1.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sections to do with the Specular allow you to vary the impact of light on the created texture when light is being shone on it. Generally, the smoother the surface of an object is, the more you need to increase teh Specular value. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Specular Texture Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Putting a jpg file in the Specular texture section will allow you to specify to the engine that generates images precise locations so that it can calculate reflection and brightness. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This file must be interpreted in black and white. Black will be less bright and/or less reflective. The white would be very reflective and/or very bright. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example of a jpg file to use in the Specular texture section: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Speculaire2.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: This jpg file must imperatively be placed beforehand in the &amp;quot;InSitu\Textures&amp;quot; folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Width Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the measurement of the width in mm of the specular texture that will appear on the object in InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Height Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the measurement of the height in mm of the specular texture that will appear on the object in InSitu.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Specular Coefficient Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a coefficient that goes from 0,00 to 1,00 that allows you to change the impact of light on the material when the material is lit up. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a matt lacquer, the coefficient will be between 0,10 and 0,20. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a satin lacquer, it will be between 0,20 and 0,40.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a glossy lacquer, it will be between 0,40 and 0,80. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example of a final image with these settings: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Speculaire3.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;The specular needs to be set up with regard to the brightness, reflection, metal coefficient and Fresnel coefficient settings.&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brightness and reflection often work in conjunction of one another. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Tableau.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Metal coefficient Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It allows objects reflected in the created texture to inherit some of its colour. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The higher the metal coefficient is, the more the reflection will be tinted. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Metal.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Fresnel coefficient Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some materials are more or less reflective, depending on the viewing angle and the angle of the light. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, the surface of the water with a grazing light will reflect the sky if we look at it from afar. However, the same water will reflect the sky a lot less if we look at it with our feet in the water. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;With a 1,00 Fresnel coefficient&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;: the object will reflect light in every direction. The coefficient needs to be applied for: Mirror, Chrome....&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;With a Fresnel coefficient approaching 0&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;: the object will only reflect light under certain conditions such as the viewing angle, the angle of the light impacting the object. For example, water and glass have a coefficient of 0,05. Metals have a coefficient between 0,3 and 0,5. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Transparency&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Transparence.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Transparency Texture Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Putting a jpg file in the Transparency Texture section will allow you to vary the opaqueness of the transparency. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This file must be a certain level of grey as in this file, black would be transparent, white would be opaque and grey would be more or less semi-opaque (varies if it's light or dark). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example of a jpg file to use in the Transparency Texture section: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Speculaire2.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: this jpg file must imperatively be placed beforehand in the &amp;quot;InSitu\Textures&amp;quot; folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example of a final image with this transparency file. As mentioned above, black is transparent, white is opaque and grey is more or less semi-opaque. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Transparence2.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Width Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the measurement of the width in mms in which the transparency texture will be displayed on the object in InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Height Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the measurement of the height in mms in which the transparency texture will be displayed on the object in InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Transparency Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a coefficient between 0,00 and 1,00 that alters the transparency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The higher the coefficient is, the more transparenct it will become. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Transparence3.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Transparency Blur section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a coefficient ranging from 0,00 to 1,00 that alters how clear objects behind a transparent texture appear. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a black cube was placed behind an object with a transparency texture with a transparency coefficient of 0,50. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Transparence4.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: the higher the transparency coefficient is, the smaller the impact of the transparency blur coefficient will be on the texture. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Refraction Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every transparent material deviated the view of objects, as shown in the photo below. A spoon dipped in a glass will be deviated by the refraction of the water and of the glass. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Verre.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The refraction index can be set between 1,00 and 3,00. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Index set at 1,00 = minimum refraction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Index set at 3,00 = maximum refraction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, here is a table of the index for a few materials: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Tableau2.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Le bump&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bump1.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Bump Texture Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Putting in a jpg file into the Bump Texture section will allow you to alter the relief of the texture. This jpg file must be interpreted in black and white. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example of a file used for the bump: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bump2.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: this jpg file must imperatively be placed beforehand into the &amp;quot;InSitu\Textures&amp;quot; folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Width Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the measurement of the width in mms in which the bump texture will be displayed on the object in InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Height Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the measurement of the height in mms in which the bump texture will be displayed on the object in InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Bump Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The bump coefficient can range from 0,00 to 1,00. The higher it is, the more pronounced the relief will be. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result with a 1,00 bump coefficient: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bump3.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Check boxes&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Cases1.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Random Box&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This box allows to offset the paving grid from the texture.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can be useful when a motif always repeats itself in the same place (on the faces of kitchen furniture or on tiles for example). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Cases2.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Rot90 (=90 rotation) Box&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This box allows you to rotate the jpg or bmp file 90° from the texture integrated in the File section. Therefore, from only one wood type texture file, you can generate a version with a horizontal wire and another with a vertical wire. All you need to do is copy the created texture and tick the Rot90 box for one of the two. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Gamma Box&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this box is ticked, it allows the texture to be impacted by the gamma correction of the engine of the computer-generated images of InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The gamma correction allows for more realistic results. It corresponds to the definition of the shadows and lights on the surfaces as well as the brightness and the contrast on 3D volumes.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Gamma.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;21%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Placing a background panorama|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_tiling_on_the_floor&amp;diff=860</id>
		<title>Placing tiling on the floor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_tiling_on_the_floor&amp;diff=860"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T07:37:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;79%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing tiling on the floor&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mbBIjAQ-0PA&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFa5_zPfdNVclL0x8F69hgP&amp;amp;index=9&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To place tiling on the floor and be in control of the height of the tiles, the colour of the joints or the positioning of the tiling, we recommend the following method. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Firstly, draw the shape of the room that you want to tile: To do so, select a wall and right click on it, then press Shape. If you don't want to tile the whole room, draw the shape manually. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, choose the tiling that you want via the @non priced tiling catalogue. If the tiles are &amp;quot;To colour&amp;quot;, then you can choose the colour that you like later on. You can also mody teh dimensions of the tiles before placing them. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then, slide the tiles onto the drawn shape. Careful, wherever you drop the tiles will be the starting point for the tile placement, meaning that the other tiles will be placed around that spot. For a diagonal placement, rotate the first tile with a right mouse click before dropping. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the joints' and tiles' colour, simply select a tile, right click on it and click on Attributes...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Posecarrelage_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &amp;quot;style&amp;quot; section, the first colour corresponds to the joint and the second to the tile. Before confirming, don't forget to paste the style to &amp;quot;All&amp;quot; so that your choices for that tiles apply to all the other tiles in the scene. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;21%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Placing wall tiling|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_a_background_panorama&amp;diff=847</id>
		<title>Placing a background panorama</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_a_background_panorama&amp;diff=847"/>
		<updated>2024-08-06T13:06:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;79%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing a background panorama&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This new feature, available with version 9 of InSitu, is accessible through the '''Scene''' drop down menu. It allows you to import a&lt;br /&gt;
panorama that is displayed 360° behind the openings of the scene in 3D view. All you'll have left to do is managing the adding of images behind each window. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Panorama_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.To use the feature, you must save your image (in the jpeg format) beforehand, on a hard drive folder, on C :INSITU/TEXTURES/'''BACKGROUND'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.Then, click on the '''Scenes''' menu and then on '''Background panorama'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Panorama2_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.A new window will appear, click on the icon that looks ike a yellow folder, then select the image you want to insert in your background panorama. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Panorama3_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now let's go through the different settings you have at your disposal (these must be set up in 3D view). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Panorama4_ENG.png|left|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''1''' - This slider allows you to manage the intensity of the image. This is very useful for when the saved image is too bright or not bright enough. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''2''' - This slider allows you to manage the horizontal positioning of the image depending on the openings of the room. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''3''' - This slider allows you to manage the vertical positioning of the image depending on the openings of the room. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''4''' - This slider allows you to manage the distance from the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;21%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[3D Object Creation Wizard (Applicat)|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_tiling_on_the_floor&amp;diff=846</id>
		<title>Placing tiling on the floor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_tiling_on_the_floor&amp;diff=846"/>
		<updated>2024-08-06T12:43:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;79%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing tiling on the floor&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mbBIjAQ-0PA&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFa5_zPfdNVclL0x8F69hgP&amp;amp;index=9&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To place tiling on the floor and be in control of the height of the tiles, the colour of the joints or the positioning of the tiling, we recommend the following method. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Firstly, draw the shape of the room that you want to tile: To do so, select a wall and right click on it, then press Shape. If you don't want to tile the whole room, draw the shape manually. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, choose the tiling that you want via the @non priced tiling catalogue. If the tiles are &amp;quot;To colour&amp;quot;, then you can choose the colour that you like later on. You can also mody teh dimensions of the tiles before placing them. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then, slide the tiles onto the drawn shape. Careful, wherever you drop the tiles will be the starting point for the tile placement, meaning that the other tiles will be placed around that spot. For a diagonal placement, rotate the first tile with a right mouse click before dropping. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the joints' and tiles' colour, simply select a tile, right click on it and click on Attributes...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Posecarrelage_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &amp;quot;style&amp;quot; section, the first colour corresponds to the joint and the second to the tile. Before confirming, don't forget to paste the style to &amp;quot;All&amp;quot; so that your choices for that tiles apply to all the other tiles in the scene. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;21%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[3D Object Creation Wizard (Applicat)|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Creating_a_palette_of_textures&amp;diff=845</id>
		<title>Creating a palette of textures</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Creating_a_palette_of_textures&amp;diff=845"/>
		<updated>2024-08-06T12:41:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;79%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Creating a palette of textures&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iljgSQeZflA&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqEJC2D74UzlTJ25Z_3IARfw&amp;amp;index=6&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create your own texture palette. This table of textures allows you to define all the colours (with or without material effects). You can link coefficients and images to textures so that you can better control characteristics like the level of transparency, of reflection and more when in the &amp;quot;photorealism&amp;quot; mode. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create your own texture palette, go to the '''Setup''' drop down menu and click on '''Graphic | Palette''' ..., (Fig.38a)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Palette.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Texture display principles&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The textures are displayed on a volume per paving, which means that the texture that you create will recreate itself as many times as possible in the available space (width, depth and height) like when tiles are placed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Pavage.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Definition of the general information&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Palette1.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Code Section&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each texture needs a code. This code must be unique and cannot exceed eight characters. In the textures table, the code is not necessarily the same as the colour's commercial code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Name Section&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This refers to the material's name. For example: Matt white melamine&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Colour Section&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the colour that will appear in all the generic finishes, objects and attributes windows in InSitu. To set the colour, click twice on the cell. A Colour dialog box will appear on screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;File Section (JPG ou BMP)&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By double clicking this section, you will give access to the material's file. For example: Exoticwood1.Jpg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: this jpg or bmp file must imperatively be placed beforehand in the &amp;quot;InSitu\Textures&amp;quot; folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Width and Height section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They correspond to the height in millimetres that the texture will be displayed in. For example, if your &amp;quot;Exoticwood1.Jpg&amp;quot; file represents a 600 mm wide and 1200 mm high sample of wood, those are the measurements you should enter.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Tinted Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This box allows you to convert the jpg or bmp file into black and white, and you can then tint it to the colour of your choice.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;For the InSitu palette: this allows you to change the colour of the texture on the object. Right click, Attributes and then change the colour.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;For a Mobiscript catalogue: this allows you to manage several colours from just one jpg file. For example: with an Oak.jpg file, you have access to wood finishes lacquered oak lacquered green, red, blue, etc.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Modulated Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a .jpg or .bmp file is too light or dark, this can lead to a loss of detail in InSitu. By ticking the &amp;quot;Modulated&amp;quot; box, the engine that creates the computer-generated image will make calculations differently from the file and will find the detail that consists of adding or removing contrast (available for textures that are nearly black and white). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Incorporated Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you tick this box, the jpg or bmp file will be integrated directly to the catalogue or the palette. This will notably allow you to copy the catalogue and/or the palette without also needing to copy the textures that are associated to it (contained in the InSitu texture folder), since they are then already contained in the catalogue and/or palette. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;The Emission&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Emission1.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Emission Section allows you to simulate an illuminating surface. It is only visible as a final computer-generated image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of an illumination image in final photorealism perspective with a coefficient of: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Emission2.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The higher the coefficient is, the more illuminating the image will be. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you add a colour via the Colour section, the emission will be coloured too. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Emission3.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;The specular&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Speculaire1.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The sections to do with the Specular allow you to vary the impact of light on the created texture when light is being shone on it. Generally, the smoother the surface of an object is, the more you need to increase teh Specular value. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Specular Texture Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Putting a jpg file in the Specular texture section will allow you to specify to the engine that generates images precise locations so that it can calculate reflection and brightness. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This file must be interpreted in black and white. Black will be less bright and/or less reflective. The white would be very reflective and/or very bright. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example of a jpg file to use in the Specular texture section: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Speculaire2.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: This jpg file must imperatively be placed beforehand in the &amp;quot;InSitu\Textures&amp;quot; folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Width Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the measurement of the width in mm of the specular texture that will appear on the object in InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Height Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the measurement of the height in mm of the specular texture that will appear on the object in InSitu.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Specular Coefficient Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a coefficient that goes from 0,00 to 1,00 that allows you to change the impact of light on the material when the material is lit up. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a matt lacquer, the coefficient will be between 0,10 and 0,20. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a satin lacquer, it will be between 0,20 and 0,40.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a glossy lacquer, it will be between 0,40 and 0,80. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example of a final image with these settings: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Speculaire3.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;The specular needs to be set up with regard to the brightness, reflection, metal coefficient and Fresnel coefficient settings.&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brightness and reflection often work in conjunction of one another. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Tableau.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Metal coefficient Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It allows objects reflected in the created texture to inherit some of its colour. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The higher the metal coefficient is, the more the reflection will be tinted. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Metal.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Fresnel coefficient Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some materials are more or less reflective, depending on the viewing angle and the angle of the light. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, the surface of the water with a grazing light will reflect the sky if we look at it from afar. However, the same water will reflect the sky a lot less if we look at it with our feet in the water. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;With a 1,00 Fresnel coefficient&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;: the object will reflect light in every direction. The coefficient needs to be applied for: Mirror, Chrome....&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;With a Fresnel coefficient approaching 0&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;: the object will only reflect light under certain conditions such as the viewing angle, the angle of the light impacting the object. For example, water and glass have a coefficient of 0,05. Metals have a coefficient between 0,3 and 0,5. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Transparency&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Transparence.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Transparency Texture Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Putting a jpg file in the Transparency Texture section will allow you to vary the opaqueness of the transparency. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This file must be a certain level of grey as in this file, black would be transparent, white would be opaque and grey would be more or less semi-opaque (varies if it's light or dark). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example of a jpg file to use in the Transparency Texture section: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Speculaire2.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: this jpg file must imperatively be placed beforehand in the &amp;quot;InSitu\Textures&amp;quot; folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example of a final image with this transparency file. As mentioned above, black is transparent, white is opaque and grey is more or less semi-opaque. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Transparence2.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Width Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the measurement of the width in mms in which the transparency texture will be displayed on the object in InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Height Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the measurement of the height in mms in which the transparency texture will be displayed on the object in InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Transparency Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a coefficient between 0,00 and 1,00 that alters the transparency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The higher the coefficient is, the more transparenct it will become. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Transparence3.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Transparency Blur section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is a coefficient ranging from 0,00 to 1,00 that alters how clear objects behind a transparent texture appear. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, a black cube was placed behind an object with a transparency texture with a transparency coefficient of 0,50. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Transparence4.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: the higher the transparency coefficient is, the smaller the impact of the transparency blur coefficient will be on the texture. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Refraction Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every transparent material deviated the view of objects, as shown in the photo below. A spoon dipped in a glass will be deviated by the refraction of the water and of the glass. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Verre.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The refraction index can be set between 1,00 and 3,00. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Index set at 1,00 = minimum refraction. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Index set at 3,00 = maximum refraction&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, here is a table of the index for a few materials: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Tableau2.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Le bump&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bump1.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Bump Texture Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Putting in a jpg file into the Bump Texture section will allow you to alter the relief of the texture. This jpg file must be interpreted in black and white. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Example of a file used for the bump: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bump2.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Important&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;: this jpg file must imperatively be placed beforehand into the &amp;quot;InSitu\Textures&amp;quot; folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Width Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the measurement of the width in mms in which the bump texture will be displayed on the object in InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Height Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the measurement of the height in mms in which the bump texture will be displayed on the object in InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Bump Section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The bump coefficient can range from 0,00 to 1,00. The higher it is, the more pronounced the relief will be. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Result with a 1,00 bump coefficient: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bump3.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Les cases à cocher&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Cases1.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Random Box&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This box allows to offset the paving grid from the texture.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This can be useful when a motif always repeats itself in the same place (on the faces of kitchen furniture or on tiles for example). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Cases2.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Rot90 (=90 rotation) Box&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This box allows you to rotate the jpg or bmp file 90° from the texture integrated in the File section. Therefore, from only one wood type texture file, you can generate a version with a horizontal wire and another with a vertical wire. All you need to do is copy the created texture and tick the Rot90 box for one of the two. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Gamma Box&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this box is ticked, it allows the texture to be impacted by the gamma correction of the engine of the computer-generated images of InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The gamma correction allows for more realistic results. It corresponds to the definition of the shadows and lights on the surfaces as well as the brightness and the contrast on 3D volumes.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Gamma.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;21%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Placing a background panorama|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Importing_2D_and_3D_files&amp;diff=844</id>
		<title>Importing 2D and 3D files</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Importing_2D_and_3D_files&amp;diff=844"/>
		<updated>2024-08-06T12:40:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;79%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Importing 2D and 3D files&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can import different types of file formats to InSitu, namely .BMP, JPG, PNG, TIF, WMF, DXF, 3DS and ALK. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;The WMF, BMP, JPG, PNG and TIF formats are for imagery. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;The DFX format is in 2D or 3D. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;The 3DS and ALK formats are in 3D. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Importing Images (.JPG, .BMP, .PNG, .TIF)&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - Go to the '''File''' drop down menu, then click on '''Import | Image (.JPG, .BMP, .PNG, .TIF)''' (Fig.33a)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 - In the dialog box, choose the file that you wish to import,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3 - Click on '''Open'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4 - Another dialog box will open allowing you to choose and/or modify the width, the height, the placement height, the geometry, the options and the style, (Fig.33b)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5 - Click on the '''OK''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Importfichier_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Importfichier2_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Width''': width of the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Height''': height of the image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Placement height''': the height position of the bottom of the image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Geometry On shape''': fills the shape with the image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Vertical Geometry''': the image will be in a vertical position. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Horizontal Geometry''': the image will be in a horizontal position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Inclined Geometry''': you can define the image's angle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Width symmetry options''': the image will be turned on its width.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Height symmetry options''': the image will be turned on its height.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Drawn in top view''': the image will be visible in top view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Drawn in perspective''': the image will be visible in perspective.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Double side''': the image is visible from both sides.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Swivel''' : the image will always be visible from the obserer's position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Decor towards the top''': the image will be visible from above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Decor towards the bottom''': the image will be visible from below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Importing DXF 2D (.DXF)&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - In the '''File''' drop down menu, click on '''Import | DXF 2D (.DXF)'''...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 - In the dialog box, choose the file that you want to import, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3 - Click on '''Open'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The file will only be visible in 2D. You can use it as a backdrop as you draw the shape above it to elevate the walls. To do so, click on the strategic points of the DFX plan without needing to measure anything (as long as the DFX is on the right scale). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Importing 3D files (.DXF, .3DS, .ALK)&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - In the '''File''' drop down menu, click on '''Import | 3D file (.DXF, .3DS, .ALK)…'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 - In the dialog box, choose the file that you want to import&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3 - Click on '''Open'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These files will be stuck in their original colour. &lt;br /&gt;
Make sure that these files are not too heavy in terms of number of faces. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ALK files are a bridge between InSitu and Obvie. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;21%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Creating a palette of textures|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Modifying_the_floor%27s_texture&amp;diff=843</id>
		<title>Modifying the floor's texture</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Modifying_the_floor%27s_texture&amp;diff=843"/>
		<updated>2024-08-06T12:37:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;79%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Modifying the floor's texture&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You have &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[Placing the floor and ceiling|placed your floor]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; but you want to modify it so that you can add a parquet floor texture for example. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;To do so, select your floor and right click, and then choose Attributes: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Texturesol_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, click on the Modify button that can be found next to the floor's current colour. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Texturesol2_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Texturesol3_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the drop down menu below Textures to select the texture you wish to give the floor. You have the choice of parquets, carpets, tiling...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click on OK to confirm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] To add your own floor textures, you must use &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[Creating a palette of textures|the palette]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;21%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Importing 2D and 3D files|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Modifying_attributes_and_finishes&amp;diff=842</id>
		<title>Modifying attributes and finishes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Modifying_attributes_and_finishes&amp;diff=842"/>
		<updated>2024-08-06T12:08:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Modifying attributes and finishes&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The features described below are also available with a right click of the mouse button having selected an object. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Attributs_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Modifying an object's attributes&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An object's attributes depend on the type of object. Therefore, an Attributes dialog box for a wall will be different from a dialog box for a piece of furniture or a side. &lt;br /&gt;
Here are the meanings of attributes which require some explanation: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - Select an object (inner edge), &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 -  Choose &amp;quot;Objects | Attributes&amp;quot;, and the &amp;quot;Attributes&amp;quot; window will appear on screen. If several objects have been selected, the window will contain the attributes of the last selected object, which is to say the reference object (the object that's flashing). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Attributs2_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Presentation of a piece of furniture's attributes&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
o '''Description''' : detailed description of the object that can be modified if the authorisation has been given in the '''Setup | Pricing | Options''' dialog box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
o '''Section''' : pricing table to which the object belongs. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
o '''Marked''' : specifies whether the object must have a label with a number or a reference (in top view or in elevation) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
o '''Billed''' : if you untick this box, the object will not be counted in the pricing of the scene even if it has a price. This allows you tu use un object from a catalogue with priced objects simply for decoration. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
o '''Details''' : specifies if the graphic details of the object must be represented in the scene; for example, the feet for furniture. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
o '''To order''' : if you untick this box, the object will be included in the pricing but not in any supplier purchase orders when those are created. This can be useful if you have the object in stock. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Thanks to the attributes window, you can modify the width, the depth, the height of an object as well the sill of a '''Window''' by changing the value in millimetres in the '''Placement height, over or under''' box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Presentation of a wall's attributes&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
o '''Start height''': height at the original end of a wall.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
o '''End height''': height at the finishing end of a wall that is different from the previous height if it's a &amp;quot;sloping&amp;quot; wall. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Changing the colour of all the walls&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The colour of a wall in persepective is an attribute. Let's see how you can modify the colour of a reference object and apply it to all the other objects. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Attributs3_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Validate the '''Colour''' dialog box,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like the new colour to be the default colour for all the next walls, then click on the '''By default''' located in the '''Style''' section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose '''All''' in the '''Paste style''' option box to apply the new colour to all the walls in the implantation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Attributs4_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] If you only want to change a the colour of a few walls, you first need to select them, change the wall of the last selected wall (reference object) as shown below, then choose &amp;quot;Selection&amp;quot; in the options box and &amp;quot;Paste style&amp;quot; before confirming in the '''Attributes''' dialog box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] Just like for the style, you can &amp;quot;paste thickness&amp;quot; of one wall to a selection of walls, to the identical walls or to all the scene's walls. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Attributs5_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Changing the texture&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By going through the attributes of an object, you can also modify the colour of an object. Click on modify to open the colour tool box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also apply one of the many, many textures offered in the drop down list. The textures with a * can be coloured. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Coeff box allows you to access the coefficients of the texture: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Emission: makes it possible for the object to emit a light source&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specular : allows you to manage how the light is reflected by the object&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brightness: allows you to manage the object's brightness level (the coefficient will be higher for lacquered elements for example)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reflection: allows you to manage the object's level of reflection (the coefficient will be high for a mirror for example) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fresnel: allows you to manage how an object reflects on its environment&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transparency: allows you to manage the obejct's level of transparency (the coefficient will be high for glass for example)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Transparency blur: allows you to manage the object's level of transparency blur (curtains, glass, ... will have a transparency blur coefficient&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bump: allows you to manage the object's level of bump, which is to say the relief of the object&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note: The Rotate by 90° box allows you to rotate a texture 90°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Attributs6_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Modify the finishes of an object&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So as to give your scene a realistic feel, you can change the colours of the elements. This feature is named '''Finishes''' in InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
Select the element (for example a window, a chair...) and the in the '''Objects''' menu, choose the '''Components''' feature and click on '''Finishes'''. Finishes are equally accessible via '''Components | Finishes''' by right clicking with the mouse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following window will pop up, giving you access to the finishes and the colour of the finishes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Attributs7_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:1orange.png|left|link=]] Click on the finish you want to modify. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:2orange.png|left|link=]] Click on the chosen colour. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:3orange.png|left|link=]] Choose whether you want to &amp;quot;Paste finish&amp;quot; to your selection of objects, to identical objects or to all objects. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Modifying the floor's texture|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Importing_3D_Warehouse_objects&amp;diff=841</id>
		<title>Importing 3D Warehouse objects</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Importing_3D_Warehouse_objects&amp;diff=841"/>
		<updated>2024-08-06T12:04:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Importing 3D Warehouse objects&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=m6RdWv_punE&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqEJC2D74UzlTJ25Z_3IARfw&amp;amp;index=3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;3D Warehouse&amp;quot; is a library of 3D objects that are freely accessible through the Internet. A search engine allows you to find the desired object amongs the thousands of objects the library contains. The &amp;quot;3D Warehouse&amp;quot; contains both everyday items and architecture elements. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All you need to do is search for the desired object and click on the download button for it to automatically appear in the current scene. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before appearing, a dialog box will allow you to input the measurements of the object, to give it various attributes (reference, description, price, etc.) and to change its colours by default. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use the &amp;quot;3D Warehouse&amp;quot;, go to '''Place''' drop down menu and then click on '''3DWarehouse object'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:3Dwarehouse_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A window will then pop up allowing you to search for whatever object you like in the search bar. Enter your key word and then click on the maginifying glass. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:3Dwarehouse2_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You then have 2 option for importing the object into InSitu: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- either by directly performing a drag and drop of the object from the 3D Warehouse window towards&lt;br /&gt;
InSitu in your project. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- or by clicking on the image to open it, seeing the information about the object, and then clicking the &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Download&amp;quot; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:3Dwarehouse3_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also download the object from your Internet browser to import it into &lt;br /&gt;
through the following technique:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
STEP 1 - DOWNLOADING THE OBJECT&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - Launch your web browser: Chrome, Edge or Firefox (the 3D Warehouse website no longer works &lt;br /&gt;
with Internet Explorer).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 - Enter this url https://3dwarehouse.sketchup.com/ in your browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3 - Search for the object in the database as you usually would. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4 - Click on the blue Download arrow and choose the 2022 format. Careful, the 3D warehouse website &lt;br /&gt;
now requires you to be signed up. Create an account if you haven't already. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:3Dwarehouse4_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
STEP 2 - IMPORTING TO INSITU&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - In your InSitu project, click on File | Import | 3D file and search for the object &lt;br /&gt;
in the folder that you saved it in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 - Select the object and click on Open. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3 - The object will be downloaded and appear in the scene. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Modifying attributes and finishes|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_wall_tiling&amp;diff=840</id>
		<title>Placing wall tiling</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_wall_tiling&amp;diff=840"/>
		<updated>2024-08-06T12:02:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing wall tiling&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tiling can be placed in two different ways: either with the help of shapes or automatically (in credenza)&lt;br /&gt;
You have the choice between a priced and non-priced version of the &amp;quot;@TILING&amp;quot; catalogue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Placing tiling with shapes (shape feature)&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to trace the edges of the entirely of the tiles, wall by wall or to the floor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23a.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose one of the two &amp;quot;@TILING&amp;quot; catalogues, priced or non-priced, and then click on &amp;quot;Place&amp;quot;. Here, we chose &amp;quot;Joined earthernware - very light brown&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23b.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Placing tiling in credenza (Scene drop down menu feature | Automatic tiling)&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nitymzlAqec&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFNRac8DBS4xYfBdCpr-tN9&amp;amp;index=7&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having created your scene on InSitu, you will need to take a reading of the following sides. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) Side A, above the work plan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Side B, the top of the work plan beneath the high furniture (credenzas)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23c.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then, you need to determine between which two points of the shape you wish to place your tiles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) Place the shape in top view, in a clockwork manner (you can go in front of a window or a door). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23d.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, make the dialog box appear by clicking on Scene | Automatic tiling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) Click on &amp;quot;Add above&amp;quot; then select a tiling (Earthenware) in the @TILING catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Drag and drop the tiles (you can change their dimensions) from the place window to the yellow box (like for a piece of furniture)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) Fill in the &amp;quot;Low&amp;quot; box, which corresponds to the height of the floor above the work surface (here: 940). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
d) Fill in the &amp;quot;Height&amp;quot; box which corresponds to the height of the credenza (here 510). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e) Finish by clicking on &amp;quot;Place&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Posecarrelage6_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is the final result in the 3D photorealistic perspective :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23f.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some points to remember:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) You can place different levels of tiles&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Le gabarit doit être retiré après la pose du carrelage The shape must be withdrawn after the tiling has been placed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) You can change different tiles: listel, decorative, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of several levels of tiling with the &amp;quot;automatic tiling&amp;quot; dialog box.&lt;br /&gt;
Keep in mind that the final height must be entered in the last row of the tiling. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Posecarrelage8_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;21%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Importing 3D Warehouse objects|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_wall_tiling&amp;diff=839</id>
		<title>Placing wall tiling</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_wall_tiling&amp;diff=839"/>
		<updated>2024-08-06T12:01:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing tiling on the floor&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tiling can be placed in two different ways: either with the help of shapes or automatically (in credenza)&lt;br /&gt;
You have the choice between a priced and non-priced version of the &amp;quot;@TILING&amp;quot; catalogue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Placing tiling with shapes (shape feature)&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to trace the edges of the entirely of the tiles, wall by wall or to the floor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23a.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose one of the two &amp;quot;@TILING&amp;quot; catalogues, priced or non-priced, and then click on &amp;quot;Place&amp;quot;. Here, we chose &amp;quot;Joined earthernware - very light brown&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23b.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Placing tiling in credenza (Scene drop down menu feature | Automatic tiling)&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nitymzlAqec&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFNRac8DBS4xYfBdCpr-tN9&amp;amp;index=7&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having created your scene on InSitu, you will need to take a reading of the following sides. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) Side A, above the work plan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Side B, the top of the work plan beneath the high furniture (credenzas)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23c.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then, you need to determine between which two points of the shape you wish to place your tiles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) Place the shape in top view, in a clockwork manner (you can go in front of a window or a door). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23d.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, make the dialog box appear by clicking on Scene | Automatic tiling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) Click on &amp;quot;Add above&amp;quot; then select a tiling (Earthenware) in the @TILING catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Drag and drop the tiles (you can change their dimensions) from the place window to the yellow box (like for a piece of furniture)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) Fill in the &amp;quot;Low&amp;quot; box, which corresponds to the height of the floor above the work surface (here: 940). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
d) Fill in the &amp;quot;Height&amp;quot; box which corresponds to the height of the credenza (here 510). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e) Finish by clicking on &amp;quot;Place&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Posecarrelage6_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is the final result in the 3D photorealistic perspective :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23f.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some points to remember:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) You can place different levels of tiles&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Le gabarit doit être retiré après la pose du carrelage The shape must be withdrawn after the tiling has been placed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) You can change different tiles: listel, decorative, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of several levels of tiling with the &amp;quot;automatic tiling&amp;quot; dialog box.&lt;br /&gt;
Keep in mind that the final height must be entered in the last row of the tiling. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Posecarrelage8_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;21%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Placing wall tiling|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_tiling_on_the_floor&amp;diff=838</id>
		<title>Placing tiling on the floor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_tiling_on_the_floor&amp;diff=838"/>
		<updated>2024-08-06T10:32:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;79%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing tiling on the floor&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mbBIjAQ-0PA&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFa5_zPfdNVclL0x8F69hgP&amp;amp;index=9&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To place tiling on the floor and be in control of the height of the tiles, the colour of the joints or the positioning of the tiling, we recommend the following method. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Firstly, draw the shape of the room that you want to tile: To do so, select a wall and right click on it, then press Shape. If you don't want to tile the whole room, draw the shape manually. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, choose the tiling that you want via the @non priced tiling catalogue. If the tiles are &amp;quot;To colour&amp;quot;, then you can choose the colour that you like later on. You can also mody teh dimensions of the tiles before placing them. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then, slide the tiles onto the drawn shape. Careful, wherever you drop the tiles will be the starting point for the tile placement, meaning that the other tiles will be placed around that spot. For a diagonal placement, rotate the first tile with a right mouse click before dropping. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the joints' and tiles' colour, simply select a tile, right click on it and click on Attributes...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Posecarrelage_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &amp;quot;style&amp;quot; section, the first colour corresponds to the joint and the second to the tile. Before confirming, don't forget to paste the style to &amp;quot;All&amp;quot; so that your choices for that tiles apply to all the other tiles in the scene. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;21%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Placing wall tiling|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_tiling_on_the_floor&amp;diff=837</id>
		<title>Placing tiling on the floor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_tiling_on_the_floor&amp;diff=837"/>
		<updated>2024-08-06T10:31:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;79%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing tiling on the floor&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mbBIjAQ-0PA&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFa5_zPfdNVclL0x8F69hgP&amp;amp;index=9&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To place tiling on the floor and be in control of the height of the tiles, the colour of the joints or the positioning of the tiling, we recommend the following method. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Firstly, draw the shape of the room that you want to tile: To do so, select a wall and right click on it, then press Shape. If you don't want to tile the whole room, draw the shape manually. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, choose the tiling that you want via the @non priced tiling catalogue. If the tiles are &amp;quot;To colour&amp;quot;, then you can choose the colour that you like later on. You can also mody teh dimensions of the tiles before placing them. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then, slide the tiles onto the drawn shape. Careful, wherever you drop the tiles will be the starting point for the tile placement, meaning that the other tiles will be placed around that spot. For a diagonal placement, rotate the first tile with a right mouse click before dropping. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the joints' and tiles' colour, simply select a tile, right click on it and click on Attributes...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Posecarrelage_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the &amp;quot;style&amp;quot; section, the first colour corresponds to the joint and the second to the tile. Before confirming, don't forget to paste the style to &amp;quot;All&amp;quot; so that your choices for that tiles apply to all the other tiles in the scene. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;21%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Placing wall tiling]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_decoration&amp;diff=836</id>
		<title>Placing decoration</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_decoration&amp;diff=836"/>
		<updated>2024-08-06T10:28:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing decoration&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yCi3_K9Rhqw&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFa5_zPfdNVclL0x8F69hgP&amp;amp;index=10&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Decorating the scene consists of placing objects that haven't been priced and that only serve an aesthetic purpose, such as a floor covering, a credenza covering, and various objects such as hobs, sinks, tables, chairs, plants, kitchen utensils, decorative objects, lighting, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] Decorative objects are placed at quite a considerable height (1600 mm or 2300 mm) for an easier placement. They automatically go down to the top of the object that you placed them over in top view. &lt;br /&gt;
Also for an easier placement, the spots underneath furniture (less than 1000 mm) go up to place themselves below the object on top of which you have place the decorative object in top view. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It's therefore easier to place decorative objects in top view. Also, access top view by choosing it in View | Top view or click on the shortcut button in your toolbar. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Posedeco_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Placing walls|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Creating_a_new_project&amp;diff=835</id>
		<title>Creating a new project</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Creating_a_new_project&amp;diff=835"/>
		<updated>2024-08-06T10:28:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Creating a new project&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ZqBG_mJpJy8&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFa5_zPfdNVclL0x8F69hgP&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A new scene is created through different successive steps corresponding to the order of the different tutorials making up the &amp;quot;Design&amp;quot; path. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1- '''Entering client information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the '''File''' drop down menu, choose '''New scene'''. A new window entitled '''Business information''' will appear on your screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; In here, you can find the current state of the folder (pending, agreement, refusal) with all the information concerning the delivery and installation date. Thanks to the schedule button, you can set up a schedule. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; About client information. Only the boxes &amp;quot;Name&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Company&amp;quot; are mandatory in order to start. The rest of the information is optional and can be filled in at a later time by going to '''Scene | Information'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Here, you will find all the pricing information and you can choose the VAT rate applied to the project (Normal, reduced, or other) as well as the currency. &lt;br /&gt;
At any time, you can change all this information by going to the '''Scene''' drop down menu and choosing '''Information'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:InfoComm_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, enter Thompson into the &amp;quot;'''Name'''&amp;quot; box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &amp;quot;'''OK'''&amp;quot; button or press '''ENTER''' on your keyboard. A new window, named '''Generic finishes (Fig.11b)''' then appears onscreen. It lets you choose the model and the finishes of the furniture that will be placed afterward. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2- '''Choosing your generic finishes'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:choixfinition_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Choose the manufacturer catalogue that you want to design your project with&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Via the drop down menu, choose one of the available models. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png]]Careful, if the models exist as models without handles, then they have been duplicated. You will find the list of models without handles below the models with handles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Fill in the finishes and the options&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; For each finish or option chosen in &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;, then new choices will be offered. The system only offers choices that exist in the catalogue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; It is possible to directly enter the catalogue reference so as to find your colours and choice of options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; As you go along and confirm your choices, visuals will allow you to check if you're happy with them. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; In some ways, harmonies are your favourites. You can save your generic finishes so that you can reuse them for other projects. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3- '''The dimensions of the scene, placing walls'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &amp;quot;'''OK'''&amp;quot; button or press '''ENTER''' on your keyboard. A new dialog box will pop up on your screen, named '''New scene'''. It allows you to: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; specify the base dimensions of your implantation (overall interior of the room) and the height of the walls&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; choose, if needed, a type of ground&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if the wall set up is simple (linear implantation, parralel, &amp;quot;L&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;U&amp;quot;) tick some of the four boxes located around the white triangle in area of the group &amp;quot;Walls&amp;quot; so that they represent your wall set up&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Nouvscène_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] If the way your walls are set up is more complicated and can't be specified by ticking the boxes described above, don't tick any box; the walls will then need to be drawn with the help of a '''shape'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &amp;quot; '''OK''' &amp;quot; button, or press on '''ENTER''' on your keyboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Placing tiling on the floor|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_decoration&amp;diff=834</id>
		<title>Placing decoration</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_decoration&amp;diff=834"/>
		<updated>2024-08-06T10:25:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing decoration&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yCi3_K9Rhqw&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFa5_zPfdNVclL0x8F69hgP&amp;amp;index=10&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Decorating the scene consists of placing objects that haven't been priced and that only serve an aesthetic purpose, such as a floor covering, a credenza covering, and various objects such as hobs, sinks, tables, chairs, plants, kitchen utensils, decorative objects, lighting, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] Decorative objects are placed at quite a considerable height (1600 mm or 2300 mm) for an easier placement. They automatically go down to the top of the object that you placed them over in top view. &lt;br /&gt;
Also for an easier placement, the spots underneath furniture (less than 1000 mm) go up to place themselves below the object on top of which you have place the decorative object in top view. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It's therefore easier to place decorative objects in top view. Also, access top view by choosing it in View | Top view or click on the shortcut button in your toolbar. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Posedeco_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Poser du carrelage au sol|Etape suivante]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_decoration&amp;diff=833</id>
		<title>Placing decoration</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_decoration&amp;diff=833"/>
		<updated>2024-08-06T10:24:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yCi3_K9Rhqw&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFa5_zPfdNVclL0x8F69hgP&amp;amp;index=10&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Decorating the scene consists of placing objects that haven't been priced and that only serve an aesthetic purpose, such as a floor covering, a credenza covering, and various objects such as hobs, sinks, tables, chairs, plants, kitchen utensils, decorative objects, lighting, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] Decorative objects are placed at quite a considerable height (1600 mm or 2300 mm) for an easier placement. They automatically go down to the top of the object that you placed them over in top view. &lt;br /&gt;
Also for an easier placement, the spots underneath furniture (less than 1000 mm) go up to place themselves below the object on top of which you have place the decorative object in top view. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It's therefore easier to place decorative objects in top view. Also, access top view by choosing it in View | Top view or click on the shortcut button in your toolbar. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Posedeco_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Poser du carrelage au sol|Etape suivante]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Walk_through_mode&amp;diff=667</id>
		<title>Walk through mode</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Walk_through_mode&amp;diff=667"/>
		<updated>2023-12-04T14:51:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;La vue Visite&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This view lets you walk through the finished scene in full screen. Real time movement mode within the scene.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Movement in the room can be done thanks to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- the arrows on the keyboard&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
-  the right mouse button (keep it pressed down + move the mouse),&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- the following keys on the keyboard:&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;commentaires&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
ESCAPE or CTRL + Page up = go up, &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;X or CTRL + Page down = go down,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;S or CTRL + left arrow = move to the left,&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;D or CTRL + right arrow = move to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on the + button allows you to move faster when in visit mode, while clicking on - allows you to move slower. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Saved walkthrough view&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- You can save your walkthrough all while moving in real time in the scene. This is saved as a text file (.TXT) and is only useable in InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- This walkthrough can also be saved as video (.AVI), which is then easy to show in Windows Media Player or VLC. To save a walk through, choose the drop down menu &amp;quot;Scene&amp;quot;, then &amp;quot;Saved walk though&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;New&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back to top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Utiliser la fenêtre secondaire|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=360_Panorama&amp;diff=666</id>
		<title>360 Panorama</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=360_Panorama&amp;diff=666"/>
		<updated>2023-12-04T14:49:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=oFgwA_9FwNo&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqEJC2D74UzlTJ25Z_3IARfw&amp;amp;index=5&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 360° panorama is fantastic tool for helping with both sales and communication. It generates a 360° 3D panorama of your room. &lt;br /&gt;
This panorama can be displayed on a computer, a tablet or a mobile phone and can be very easily sent by email to the final customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;[http://www.myinsitu.com/Pano.htm?panoDir=/KDPanos/pano_0_org Voir un exemple de panorama 360]&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;[https://panoramas.b-cdn.net/Viewer1/pano.htm?panoDir=/panoramas/895790705-1668070656 Voir un exemple de Panorama 360° multi vues]&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can see, it allows you to visualise the entirety of the project while being able to change the point of view thanks to the dots. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have finished your project, make sure that you save your [[Placing a visual field|visual frields]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also generate 360° panoramas without visual fields. In that case, the panroama is generated from the middle of the room or the view at the time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the &amp;quot;file&amp;quot; drop down menu and then choose &amp;quot;Post 360° Panorama&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Panorama360_ENG.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two different resolutions are available: &lt;br /&gt;
Medium resolution (1024 pixels)&lt;br /&gt;
High resolution (2048 pixels)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Careful, the high resolution will take longer to generate. Also be aware that the calculations use your computer's processing power, which means it's an important factor to take into account...  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have chosen the resolution you want, you can choose the number of points of view from which you want the panorama to be generated. &lt;br /&gt;
Once again, the more points of view chosen, the longer the panorama will take to generate. These points of views, in other words, the visual fields that were saved previously, will then become the dots that let you change your point of view.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Panorama360B_ENG.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also choose the real time photorealistic quality to generate a 360 much quicker but of lower quality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When it has finished, the software will open the panorama on an Internet page. &lt;br /&gt;
You can copy and paste the link and then send it to your client via email. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;border:solid 1px #ea560d;border-radius:5px;background-color:#f6f6f6;padding:10px&amp;quot;&amp;gt; To easily find your links, we suggest creating an excel or similar file and pasting the various links you have generated. It will be much easier to sort through them. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Le WebShare|Etape suivante]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_wall_tiling&amp;diff=518</id>
		<title>Placing wall tiling</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_wall_tiling&amp;diff=518"/>
		<updated>2023-10-24T07:47:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Tiling can be placed in two different ways: either with the help of shapes or automatically (in credenza)&lt;br /&gt;
You have the choice between a priced and non-priced version of the &amp;quot;@TILING&amp;quot; catalogue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Placing tiling with shapes (shape feature)&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to trace the edges of the entirely of the tiles, wall by wall or to the floor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23a.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose one of the two &amp;quot;@TILING&amp;quot; catalogues, priced or non-priced, and then click on &amp;quot;Place&amp;quot;. Here, we chose &amp;quot;Joined earthernware - very light brown&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23b.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Placing tiling in credenza (Scene drop down menu feature | Automatic tiling)&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nitymzlAqec&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFNRac8DBS4xYfBdCpr-tN9&amp;amp;index=7&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having created your scene on InSitu, you will need to take a reading of the following sides. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) Side A, above the work plan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Side B, the top of the work plan beneath the high furniture (credenzas)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23c.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then, you need to determine between which two points of the shape you wish to place your tiles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) Place the shape in top view, in a clockwork manner (you can go in front of a window or a door). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23d.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, make the dialog box appear by clicking on Scene | Automatic tiling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) Click on &amp;quot;Add above&amp;quot; then select a tiling (Earthenware) in the @TILING catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Drag and drop the tiles (you can change their dimensions) from the place window to the yellow box (like for a piece of furniture)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) Fill in the &amp;quot;Low&amp;quot; box, which corresponds to the height of the floor above the work surface (here: 940). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
d) Fill in the &amp;quot;Height&amp;quot; box which corresponds to the height of the credenza (here 510). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e) Finish by clicking on &amp;quot;Place&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Posecarrelage6_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is the final result in the 3D photorealistic perspective :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23f.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some points to remember:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) You can place different levels of tiles&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Le gabarit doit être retiré après la pose du carrelage The shape must be withdrawn after the tiling has been placed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) You can change different tiles: listel, decorative, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of several levels of tiling with the &amp;quot;automatic tiling&amp;quot; dialog box.&lt;br /&gt;
Keep in mind that the final height must be entered in the last row of the tiling. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Posecarrelage8_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;21%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Importer des objets 3D Warehouse|Etape suivante]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Saving_and_printing_the_project&amp;diff=505</id>
		<title>Saving and printing the project</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Saving_and_printing_the_project&amp;diff=505"/>
		<updated>2023-08-09T12:32:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to save your design, by clicking on the '''File''' drop down menu: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. '''File | Save''' : Saves the scene under the title of '''Company''' and '''Business''' or '''Surname''' and '''Name''' that you entered when creating the scene in the '''Business Information''' window. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. '''File | Save as''' : Saves the scene under the title of '''Company''' and '''Business''' or '''Surname''' and '''Name''' that you can change in the '''Business Information''' window that pops up.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. '''File | Save version''' : Saves the scene under the title of '''Company''' and '''Business''' or '''Surname''' and '''Name''' that you entered when creating the scene in the '''Business Information''' window by increasing the version. You can save several different versions of the same project.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SauvegardeProjet1_EN.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
InSitu prints the current view as it is displayed on the screen.The dimensions of the scene entered at the beginning (green frame) are important for the printing as well as the 3D display. &lt;br /&gt;
Before printing, make sure that the printer is suitably set up and well adapted to the view (size and orientation of the paper, etc.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to make sure that the view fits well in the frame, click on '''Zoom | Adjusted'''. To start printing, click on '''File | Print'''.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to print a top or elevation view, a dialog box entitled '''Printing format''' will appear, asking you to choose the scale which you want the view printed in.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ImpressionProjet1_EN.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default scale is the most appropriate considering the dimensions of the area you want to print as well as the format and orientation of the paper. If you want to, you can choose a different scale, or choose '''adjusted''' if you would like InSitu to make the scene best fit the paper, without worrying about a standardised scale. Then, press on &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or click on the ENTER key to keep printing, or choose &amp;quot;Cancel&amp;quot; to cancel it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're printing a virtual reality or photorealistic perspective view, the '''Image resolution''' dialog box will appear, asking you to choose the resolution, which is to say at which fineness the view will be printed in (number of dots in width and in height compared to your screen resolution). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ImpressionProjet2_EN.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;x1&amp;quot; screen resolution is useful as the printing will start very quickly, the image calculation having already been done on screen. However, if you want your printings to have a higher resolution than what is displayed on screen, choose &amp;quot;x 1,5&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;x 2&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;x3&amp;quot;. These choices will lead to a new image calculation and this calculation will take slightly more time than the screen image. Indeed, the &amp;quot;x 3&amp;quot; choice will, for example, result in an image with 9 times more pixels than what is displayed on screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When in realist perspective, you have the option of choosing an output resolution towards the printer, with vector mode being very slow with processing languages like PCL5 or PCL6. &lt;br /&gt;
Some printers can be very slow to print scenes in perspective view. To solve this issue, it is recommended to select the vector printing mode. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] If you want the software to remember your printing choices, all you need to do is click the by default button and your choices will be saved. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Updating an old project with a recent rate|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Modifying_the_floor%27s_texture&amp;diff=480</id>
		<title>Modifying the floor's texture</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Modifying_the_floor%27s_texture&amp;diff=480"/>
		<updated>2023-07-06T10:08:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;79%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You have &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[Placing the floor and ceiling|placed your floor]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; but you want to modify it so that you can add a parquet floor texture for example. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;To do so, select your floor and right click, and then choose Attributes: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Texturesol_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, click on the Modify button that can be found next to the floor's current colour. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Texturesol2_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Texturesol3_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the drop down menu below Textures to select the texture you wish to give the floor. You have the choice of parquets, carpets, tiling...&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click on OK to confirm. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] To add your own floor textures, you must use &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[Creating a palette of textures|the palette]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;21%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Importer des fichiers 2D et 3D|Etape suivante]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Optimising_lighting&amp;diff=448</id>
		<title>Optimising lighting</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Optimising_lighting&amp;diff=448"/>
		<updated>2023-07-05T08:49:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bVlvsI0WnSc&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqEJC2D74UzlTJ25Z_3IARfw&amp;amp;index=3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Dialog box for lighting the scene in Realtime photorealistic perspective mode&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In '''Realtime photorealistic perspective''' mode, the changes made in this dialog box immediately take effect in the view, enabling you to achieve your desired lighting very quickly. These settings also apply to the final photorealism.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changes linked to the lighting can be found in the '''Scene''' drop down menu under '''Lighting''' or via the icon [[Image:Lampe.JPG|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Default settings in the dialog box&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The lighting window is divided into 3 tabs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Tab 1: Natural light'''&lt;br /&gt;
Allows you to adjust natural lighting settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lumières_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Tab 2: Artificial light'''&lt;br /&gt;
Allows you to adjust the artificial light settings. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lumières2_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Tab 3: Light sources'''&lt;br /&gt;
Allows you to manage the lighting that you added yourself to the scene settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lumières3_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In our example, 4 spots have been placed towards the bottom (these spots are available in the @Base forms catalogue, in the Light sources chapter). They are therefore adjustable in the dialog box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''A. Column''' refers to whether the light sources are lit. You can manage each element individually and light (or not) the ones that you wish to light. The box is ticked by default and means that the selected light source is lit. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Sel. column''' allows you to select the object. Therefore, in a scene in which you placed several light sources of the same type, you can easily identify the light source affected by the settings. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Colour column''' allows you to choose the colour of the diffused light. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''IES column''' gives you the option of changing the style of light projected (the curve of the beam). You have the choice of 20 different options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lumières4_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finally, you can choose the intensity of the light sources, either for each individual light source or for the entirety of light sources in a scene thanks to the intensity slider. &lt;br /&gt;
If you only wish to adjust one light source, select it before moving the Intensity slider. &lt;br /&gt;
To manage the intensity of all the light sources or a particular selection of them, tick the Sel. box to select the relevant light sources. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Adjusting the tone&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lumières5_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The settings window for tone is only available for the '''Realtime photorealistic perspective''' and '''Final photorealistic perspective''' views. It appears automatically at the end of the calculation of the final photorealism. However, you can access it at any time through the '''View''' drop down menu, and then '''Tone mapping'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;The luminous halo&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This lets you play around with the rendering of the lightings. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuephotoreelfinal6_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuephotoreelfinal7_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Light source&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CThis feature allows you to adjust the light source in the Realistic drawing perspective view: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;- intensity&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;- contrast&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;- horizontal and vertical angles of light propagation in realistic drawing perspective.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lumières6_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default values are: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Light = 80&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Contrast = 30&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Horizontal angle = 70&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;Vertical angle = - 45.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] The decorative luminaires can also help light the scene. To activate its lighting, you must open a luminaire like you would open a door, via the feature in '''Selection | Open'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Prérequis|Aller au parcours suivant]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Final_photorealistic_perspective&amp;diff=447</id>
		<title>Final photorealistic perspective</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Final_photorealistic_perspective&amp;diff=447"/>
		<updated>2023-07-05T08:31:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Important&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Visualisation problems? If you wish to hide a bothersome wall or, do the opposite and disable this option, go to the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;[[Configurer les options graphiques|Setting up graphic options]]&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Final photorealistic perspective is a &amp;quot;high quality&amp;quot; view. The materials stand out and their specificities become clear (the reliefs, the shine, the reflection, ...)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuephotoreelfinal_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pick '''View''' | '''Final photorealistic perspective'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The image is produced after successive calculations of iterations that converge towards the optimal quality. &lt;br /&gt;
By default, the calculation stops after its sixteenth iteration. Then, a dialog box will appear, allowing you to play with the sliders and alter the intensity, the contrast, the colour, the temperature and the luminous halo. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuephotoreelfinal2_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you no longer want this dialog box to appear, simply go to '''View''' | '''Tone mapping''' and tick the '''Do not show this dialog box after each image'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To come back on the calculation of an iteration, all you need to do is press on the F2 key. The software will then perform calculations for an infinite number of iterations. You will need to end these calculations by pressing on the ESCAPE key. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is worth noting that you can change the default number of iterations via the '''Scene''' drop down menu, then '''Photorealism'''. In the '''Final photorealism''' tab, the number of iterations will be displayed, which you can change. If you want this change to apply every time, remember to press the '''By default''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:LogoInfo.png|link=]] If you wish to change the number of iterations, go to '''Scene | Photorealism''' and then to the '''Final photorealism''' tab and change the number of iterations from 16 to whatever you prefer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuephotoreelfinal3_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;The temperature&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to set the scene's colour ambiance. &lt;br /&gt;
The further the slider is to the left, the more cold, blue-dominated tones the scene will have. &lt;br /&gt;
The further the slider is to the right, the more warm, yellow-dominated tones the scene will have. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuephotoreelfinal4_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuephotoreelfinal5_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Le panorama 360|Etape suivante]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Positioning_the_observer&amp;diff=446</id>
		<title>Positioning the observer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Positioning_the_observer&amp;diff=446"/>
		<updated>2023-07-05T08:27:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Observer view&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Observer view lets you manually adjust the field of view, in the 3D view, by the project altitude and tilt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The altitude refers to the height of the view and the tilt allows you to have bird's eye views, for example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To access it, go to InSitu's '''View''' drop down menu, and then click on '''Observer'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Observateur_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Initial Observer view&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Initial Observer''' view lets you reposition the starting point of the visual field in 3D view.&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To activate it, go to '''View | Initial Observer'''. This feature if very useful when you have adjusted the settings but you want to cancel these changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Optimiser l'éclairage|Etape suivante]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_a_visual_field&amp;diff=445</id>
		<title>Placing a visual field</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_a_visual_field&amp;diff=445"/>
		<updated>2023-07-05T07:55:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AwE5R8hKZsk&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqEJC2D74UzlTJ25Z_3IARfw&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Visual fields allow you to orient yourself according to the desired direction, angle of vision on a part of your project. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Go to '''View''' | '''Visual field'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Position the eye icon in the direction of your desired visual field. The illustration below explains the order that you want to &amp;quot;trace&amp;quot; with the mouse to place the visual field. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Champdevision_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Champvision_FR.gif|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Go to '''View''' | '''Real time photorealistic perspective''' to see the project via the visual field that you like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- To delete a visual field, in the '''View''' drop down menu, click on '''Observation point''' | '''Initial'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- To save your visual fields, go to '''View''' | '''Observation point''' | '''save observer'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Positionner l'observateur|Etape suivante]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Using_the_secondary_window&amp;diff=444</id>
		<title>Using the secondary window</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Using_the_secondary_window&amp;diff=444"/>
		<updated>2023-07-05T07:52:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
As well as the main window, InSitu can open a second window which always contains a perspective view of teh current scene. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To open it, go to '''View | Secondary window'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can then work in top view or elevation view, all while seeing the scene get built in perspective. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fenetresecondaire_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have two screens connected to your graphics card, you can display the main window on one screen and the secondary window on the other screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The screen displaying the secondary window (always the perspective) can also be shown to clients. You can then make changes that they won't see. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Placer le champ de vision|Etape suivante]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=360_Panorama&amp;diff=443</id>
		<title>360 Panorama</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=360_Panorama&amp;diff=443"/>
		<updated>2023-07-05T07:51:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=oFgwA_9FwNo&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqEJC2D74UzlTJ25Z_3IARfw&amp;amp;index=5&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 360° panorama is fantastic tool for helping with both sales and communication. It generates a 360° 3D panorama of your room. &lt;br /&gt;
This panorama can be displayed on a computer, a tablet or a mobile phone and can be very easily sent by email to the final customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;[http://www.myinsitu.com/Pano.htm?panoDir=/KDPanos/pano_0_org Voir un exemple de panorama 360]&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;[https://pano-1add6.kxcdn.com/Viewer1/pano.htm?panoDir=/panoramas/895790705-25969109 Voir un exemple de Panorama 360° multi vues]&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can see, it allows you to visualise the entirety of the project while being able to change the point of view thanks to the dots. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have finished your project, make sure that you save your [[Placing a visual field|visual frields]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also generate 360° panoramas without visual fields. In that case, the panroama is generated from the middle of the room or the view at the time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the &amp;quot;file&amp;quot; drop down menu and then choose &amp;quot;Post 360° Panorama&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Panorama360_ENG.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Two different resolutions are available: &lt;br /&gt;
Medium resolution (1024 pixels)&lt;br /&gt;
High resolution (2048 pixels)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Careful, the high resolution will take longer to generate. Also be aware that the calculations use your computer's processing power, which means it's an important factor to take into account...  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have chosen the resolution you want, you can choose the number of points of view from which you want the panorama to be generated. &lt;br /&gt;
Once again, the more points of view chosen, the longer the panorama will take to generate. These points of views, in other words, the visual fields that were saved previously, will then become the dots that let you change your point of view.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Panorama360B_ENG.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also choose the real time photorealistic quality to generate a 360 much quicker but of lower quality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When it has finished, the software will open the panorama on an Internet page. &lt;br /&gt;
You can copy and paste the link and then send it to your client via email. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p style=&amp;quot;border:solid 1px #ea560d;border-radius:5px;background-color:#f6f6f6;padding:10px&amp;quot;&amp;gt; To easily find your links, we suggest creating an excel or similar file and pasting the various links you have generated. It will be much easier to sort through them. &amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Le WebShare|Etape suivante]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=En_Visualiser&amp;diff=442</id>
		<title>En Visualiser</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=En_Visualiser&amp;diff=442"/>
		<updated>2023-07-05T07:43:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;barre_menu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td style=&amp;quot;border: 1px solid #aaaaaa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;entetehome5&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:Visualisation.png|center|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;titrehome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Visualising&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding: 10px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold; color: #5a5959;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Détail du parcours&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr width=&amp;quot;95%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Top view]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Elevation views]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Perspective views]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Realistic drawing perspective]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Real time photorealistic perspective]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Final photorealistic perspective]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Virtual reality view]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[360 Panorama]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Walk through mode]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Using the secondary window]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Placing a visual field]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Positioning the observer]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Optimising lighting]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr width=&amp;quot;95%&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin-top: 15px; margin-bottom: 15px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_wiki_menu.gif|link=]] &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;[https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Main_Page Accueil WikInSitu]&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Virtual_reality_view&amp;diff=441</id>
		<title>Virtual reality view</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Virtual_reality_view&amp;diff=441"/>
		<updated>2023-07-05T07:42:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With an Oculus Rift® or HTC Vive® headset, then InSitu VR allows your client to visualise the entire project in virtual reality. The user can move freely throughout the space, moving forward, backwards, turning 360°, crouching down and looking up. Their movements are automatically detected by the headset. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YcXAQZGuvp0&amp;amp;feature=youtu.be&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Watch the video tutorial&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;How it works&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the headset is connected and set-up, launch the view created for VR by clicking on View &amp;gt; Virtual reality or via the icon [[Image:IconeVR.JPG|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:RealitéVirtuelle_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 3D view is then transferred to the headset, allowing its user free to virtually stroll through the development project. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
La réalité virtuelle est interactive, il est possible d’ouvrir les portes et les tiroirs quand on se promène dans le projet (non disponible pour l’ensemble des catalogues - en cours de déploiement). The virtual reality is interactive, meaning that it is possible to open doors and drawers while walking through the project (not available for the entirety of the catalogues - still in the process of being rolled out)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:RealitéVirtuelle2_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:RealitéVirtuelle3_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back to top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Les vues en élévation|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Final_photorealistic_perspective&amp;diff=440</id>
		<title>Final photorealistic perspective</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Final_photorealistic_perspective&amp;diff=440"/>
		<updated>2023-07-05T07:37:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jérémie: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Important&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Visualisation problems? If you wish to hide a bothersome wall or, do the opposite and disable this option, go to the &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;[[Configurer les options graphiques|Setting up graphic options]]&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Final photorealistic perspective is a &amp;quot;high quality&amp;quot; view. The materials stand out and their specificities become clear (the reliefs, the shine, the reflection, ...)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuephotoreelfinal_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pick '''View''' | '''Final photorealistic perspective'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The image is produced after successive calculations of iterations that converge towards the optimal quality. &lt;br /&gt;
By default, the calculation stops after its sixteenth iteration. Then, a dialog box will appear, allowing you to play with the sliders and alter the intensity, the contrast, the colour, the temperature and the luminous halo. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuephotoreelfinal2_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you no longer want this dialog box to appear, simply go to '''View''' | '''Tone mapping''' and tick the '''Do not show this dialog box after each image'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To come back on the calculation of an iteration, all you need to do is press on the F2 key. The software will then perform calculations for an infinite number of iterations. You will need to end these calculations by pressing on the ESCAPE key. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is worth noting that you can change the default number of iterations via the '''Scene''' drop down menu, then '''Photorealism'''. In the '''Final photorealism''' tab, the number of iterations will be displayed, which you can change. If you want this change to apply every time, remember to press the '''By default''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:LogoInfo.png|link=]] If you wish to change the number of iterations, go to '''Scene | Photorealism''' and then to the '''Final photorealism''' tab and change the number of iterations from 16 to whatever you prefer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuephotoreelfinal3_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;The temperature&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to set the scene's colour ambiance. &lt;br /&gt;
The further the slider is to the left, the more cold, blue-dominated tones the scene will have. &lt;br /&gt;
The further the slider is to the right, the more warm, yellow-dominated tones the scene will have. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuephotoreelfinal4_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuephotoreelfinal5_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;The luminous halo&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Il permet de jouer sur le rendu des éclairages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuephotoreelfinal6_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuephotoreelfinal7_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Le panorama 360|Etape suivante]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jérémie</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>